JP2022147285A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement properties of a performance using a special image.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: suggestive performance execution means that can suggest that a game state is controlled to an advantageous state and can execute suggestive performances of a plurality of kinds in which degrees of expectation differ according to performance modes; particular image display performance execution means that can display a particular image; and special performance execution means that can execute a special performance for changing the suggestive performance executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a degree of expectation higher than that of the one performance mode by using the particular image being displayed. The special performance execution means displays a particular correspondence image when the suggestive performance is executed, and executes the special performance in a mode that the particular image acts on the particular correspondence image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As shown in Patent Document 1, as a gaming machine, a shooting device shoots game balls, which are game media, into a game area. prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player. As shown in Patent Document 3, by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display, there is a device that enables execution of an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body as a structure (for example, Patent Document 3 reference).

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects that are controlled in an advantageous state and that have different expectations depending on the mode of effect, and expect the suggestive effects using the displayed special images. There are some that change to a high performance mode. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive notice effect, a development destination notice effect, or an active suspension notice effect is executed by a present image displayed by opening a present box of the same mode. Further, for example, in Patent Document 2, by displaying information on the stock of accessories on the screen, it is possible to inform the player that an effect in which the movable body falls will be executed later as a strong advance notice effect. Have been described.

JP 2015-134097 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50980 JP 2019-141396 A

However, there is still room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1-3.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of performances using special images.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
In addition to suggesting that it will be controlled to an advantageous state, there are multiple types of suggestion effects with different expectations depending on the mode of presentation (for example, a title display is displayed in a predetermined mode, and an active display is displayed in a predetermined mode). Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing production, dialogue production that displays dialogue display in a predetermined mode, decorative pattern production that displays decorative patterns in a predetermined mode, etc.);
By using a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12) and the displayed special image, a suggestive effect executed in one effect mode is displayed. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect of changing the one effect mode to a more expected effect mode (for example, a chance-up effect of changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue). When,
It has a display area that can display an image, and game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the number of first special figure pending storage, the number of second special figure pending storage, and a small display area smaller than the decorative pattern) a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, decorative pattern or background image) displayed in the display area and a display image for the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, layer 1 image drawing area, layer 2 image drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area shown in FIG. 19-5) etc.), and can generate an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
Effect execution means capable of executing the effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIGS. 19 to 17);
with
The storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (for example, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the characteristic portion 006SG) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic portion 006SG, the position above or below the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information). The part where the image data for the
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 23). As above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. By doing so, as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-26, the first interface The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area with the highest image display priority),
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed, and performs a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. (For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH and the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is stuck with the key image 030IWG12. -15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest. Further, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. In addition, when the specific effect is executed, the display image of the game-related information is displaced along with the displacement of the specific image, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from deteriorating. can increase

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big-hit determination table in characteristic part 030IW, and a variation pattern table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a variation pattern and a breakdown of variation time; It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each effect during the super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution time of each production|presentation in a super reach first half part and a second half part. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decoration symbol change pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of stock effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of chance up fanning production (false). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (suggestion) image and a keyhole (substantial) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example in the production control board. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of layers; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an application example of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing contents of a VRAM; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of display image processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and a displayable area on an image display device; (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative patterns in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative patterns in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion rendering; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win suggestion production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win suggestion production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion effect in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the revival production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the revival production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a resurrection effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the resurrection effect in the modified example; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the look-ahead advance notice production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a pre-reading foretelling effect in a modified example; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead advance notice effect in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead advance notice effect in the modified example; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of promotion production|presentation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image produced|generated in promotion production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area displayable by an image display device; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of promotion production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of promotion production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a temporary stop suggesting rendering in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a temporary stop suggesting rendering in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the temporary stop information production|presentation in a modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification in a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a variable-display forewarning rendering and a development suggesting rendering in a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine in a modified example;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 030IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a variation pattern table. Among them, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a big hit determination table used in the characteristic portion 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the jackpot will be awarded with a probability of about 1/300 in the low probability state, and about 1/300 in the high probability state. It is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/30.

In addition, not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), for example, depending on whether it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol or the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol , may have different jackpot probabilities.

Further, for example, it is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. If it is possible to check the set value of or change the set value, the big hit probability may differ depending on which set value is set.

Also, a plurality of jackpot types may be provided, each having a different advantage. Specifically, according to the jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may differ. In this case, when it is determined to be a big win based on the random number for winning determination, the type of the big win is determined based on the random number for determining the type.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 030IW. Among them, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. The variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in the low-probability state. A variation pattern table (not shown) having different ratios of determination values may be used in the high-probability state and the high-base state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the case of deviation, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PA2-5 ( Super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), a variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

In this example, during the super reach after the reach is established, the stock effect of stocking the item (key in this example) and the effect of another effect using the stocked item (key) are changed (that is, the other effect It is configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit suggested by With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the super reach, and to increase the expectation for the stock effect and the chance-up effect. Hereinafter, executing the chance-up effect using the stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, super ready-to-win is a series of performances unfolded after ready-to-win is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) are not executed, during the super reach, the outpost of the battle effect. There are two parts, namely, a super ready-to-win first half part A in which a prelude effect is executed, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. Further, when the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, PB2-5 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) is executed, the stock effect is executed during the super reach. There are three parts: a super ready-to-win introduction part in which is executed, a super ready-to-win first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed together with a sentry effect, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. With such a configuration, during the period before the start of the battle production where the excitement of Super Reach reaches its climax, the stock production and the chance-up production are executed, so it is possible to gradually increase the production and enhance the production effect. can.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C), the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is executed is the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is not executed. The degree of expectation for big hit is higher than that of reach, and the degree of expectation for big hit is higher in super reach B than in super reach A. - 特許庁With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) will be executed and in which super reach it will be executed.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 8-1, for example, a variation pattern is provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed once or more times before the super reach, and the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. You may do so.

Next, the configuration of each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the variation pattern and the breakdown of the variation time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the elements that make up the variation pattern (which can be said to be an effect executed in the variation pattern) are "normal variation" that performs variable display in a normal manner, and ``Shortened variation'' that performs variable display in a shortened manner, ``Normal reach'' that performs normal reach as a reach effect, and ``Super reach introduction (stock effect)'' that performs a stock effect in the super reach introduction part as a reach effect, "Super reach first half A (no chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part A has a forward appearance, and "super reach first half B (with chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part B performs a guard effect and chance up effect. And, there is a "super reach second half (battle production)" in which the battle production is performed in the second half of the super reach, and a "blessing production at the time of winning" in which a blessing production is performed to celebrate the big hit. It should be noted that the example shown in FIG. 8B is not the only example, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo continuous effect may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not normal fluctuation, and includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element constituting the fluctuation pattern, and the total fluctuation time is 15 seconds. In addition, the variation pattern PA1-2 is a variation pattern that will not be shortened variation, includes "shortened variation" (5 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 5 seconds.

Also, the variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern that is lost after normal reach, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 20 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are variation patterns that are lost after passing through the super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and the super reach second half part, and the elements constituting the variation pattern are " The total variable time is 70 seconds including the first half of super reach A (no chance-up effect)” (30 seconds) and the second half of super reach (battle effect)” (40 seconds).

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are variation patterns that are lost through the super reach introduction part, the super reach first half part B in which the chance-up effect is executed, and the super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds), and the total variation time is 110 seconds.

In addition, the variation pattern PB2-1 is a variation pattern that changes from normal reach to a big hit, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) and "blessing effect at the time of winning" (20 seconds) as elements constituting the variation pattern. The variation time is 40 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are variation patterns that become a big hit after going through a super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and a super reach second half part. Total variable time including super reach first half A (no chance up effect)” (30 seconds), “super reach second half (battle effect)” (40 seconds), and “blessing effect when winning” (20 seconds) is 90 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are variation patterns that result in a big hit after passing through a super reach introduction part, a super reach first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed, and a super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds) and the “blessing effect at the time of winning” (20 seconds), and the total variable time is 130 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-2, the super reach A and the super reach B have the same performance time for the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. The rendering time may be different depending on the type.

(Execution timing of each production during Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the variation time (that is, the total performance execution time) is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the performance control board 12 side determines the stock performance and the chance-up performance execution timing based on the variation pattern. Or, the performance execution time is determined. However, although the details will be described later, depending on the type of effect, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, a variation pattern in which the performance timing and the performance execution time of the stock effect and the chance up effect are predetermined is provided, and the main board 11 side determines one of the variation patterns. may

FIG. 8-3(A) shows a case where super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the outpost effect is executed in the first half part A of super reach, and the battle effect is executed in the second half part of super reach.

FIG. 8-3(B) shows a case where super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, the stock effect is first executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the super ready-to-win first half part B, the chance-up effect is executed together with the outpost effect. Then, the battle effect is executed in the second half of the super reach.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, at maximum three timings of timings A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) There is an opportunity to stock items (keys). In this example, a maximum of 3 timings are provided as opportunities to stock items (keys) in the stock effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. There may be.

Also, in this example, in the first half of Super Reach, the title display (effect to display the title display), the active display (effect to display the active display), the dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), and the decoration pattern ( The "decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by each effect mode differs, and when the corresponding chance-up effect is executed, the mode of effect changes (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested increases). is configured as

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock effect, title display (effect to display title display), active display (effect to display active display), dialogue display (effect to display dialogue) A chance-up effect targeting either the dialogue effect to be displayed) or a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed once, and two items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect. , Title display (effect to display the title display), active display (effect to display the active display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of the two targets, and when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect, the title display (effect to display the title display), active display (display active display) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of three of 3 of the following: a line display (a line effect of displaying a line display), and a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern). Note that the configuration is not limited to this example, and the chance-up effect may be executed a plurality of times for one effect. In this case, the stocked items (keys) are released each time the chance-up effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in this example, the first to fifth timings ((1) shown in FIG. 8-3 (B)) are the timings at which the chance-up effect can be executed in the first half of the super reach. to (5)) are provided. In this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of Super Reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of Super Reach), but are common to any variation pattern (or type of Super Reach). may be the timing of

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. ) can be executed at the second timing or the fourth timing, and the chance-up effect for dialogue display (dialogue production to display dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing , and the chance-up effect for decorative symbols (decorative symbol effect for displaying decorative symbols) is configured to be executable at the fifth timing.

At which of the second timing and the fourth timing the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is to be executed is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect for title display (effect to display the title display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display) or decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a configuration, the timing at which the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the title display may be performed. (Direction to display title display), Dialogue display (Direction to display dialogue display) or Decorative pattern (Decorative pattern effect to display decorative pattern) Either one of them may be determined by lottery.

Note that the execution order of the effects that are targets of the chance-up effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be another order. However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be improved by the chance-up performance (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be changed to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win) as the order of targets for the chance-up performance becomes later. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed during the super reach, the stock effect is always executed. There may also be a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the game. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a variation pattern including a stock effect and a chance-up effect and a variation pattern including a chance-up effect without a stock effect are provided in advance, and the former is provided on the main board 11 side. When the variation pattern is determined, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance-up performance according to the modes shown in FIGS. When the board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance-up performance and the type of the chance-up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without executing the stock effect, the presence of the chance-up effect increases, and it is visualized that the chance-up effect will be executed in the future. The player can enjoy the performance while having a sense of superiority in the situation. Furthermore, in such a case, if the stock effect is executed in advance, the ratio of executing many chance-up effects is higher than when it is not executed (that is, the chance-up effect increases the expectation of a big hit. It may be configured so that it is likely to be high), the execution of the stock effect may be prioritized, and the execution of the stock effect may be expected.

In addition, in this example, the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are always present in super reach, but the configuration is not limited to this. By omitting it, the super reach introduction part may be followed by the super reach second half part, and the chance-up effect may be performed in the second half part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total effect execution time of reach with a high degree of expectation from becoming too long.

In addition, when setting an exception pattern that omits the first half of Super Reach, in the basic pattern that is not omitted as a premise, when developing from the first half of Super Reach to the second half of Super Reach, the boundary between the first half and the second half is related to Super Reach. It is desirable that another effect image is displayed in such a manner as to completely cover the effect image, or that the effect contents are clearly divided between the first half and the latter half. For example, at the boundary between the first half and the second half, an effect image or character related to the chance-up effect shown in FIG. may be displayed in such a manner as to cover all of them. Further, for example, the production contents may be divided such that the outpost production is executed in the first half part and the battle production is executed in the second half part, or the battle scene is displayed in the first half part and the character performs a special move in the second half part. The content of the presentation may be divided by displaying a final scene such as a draw. By doing so, even when the super reach first half part is omitted, it is possible to make the flow of production feel natural.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for the sake of convenience, the intervals between the stock timing and the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed are uniform. OK.

(Execution time of each production in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in Super Reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach.

Of the examples shown in FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the title display (title display is displayed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach (the timing of (1) shown in FIG. 8-4) effect) is executed, and a chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in FIG. 8-4). Then, at the fifth timing (timing of (5) shown in FIG. 8-4), an example of executing a chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) (of the chance-up effect to be described later) corresponding to the eighth effect pattern) is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 8-4 (B), the chance-up effect for the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) is executed at the fifth timing. An example (corresponding to the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect to be described later) in which the chance-up effect is executed for the decoration symbol effect displaying the pattern is shown.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second half of Super Reach, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body 32 moves before the end of variation (for example, when notifying that the game will be controlled for a big win).

In this example, there are two cases: a case where the dialogue effect without the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4A is executed, and a case where the dialogue effect with the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4B is executed. , the performance to be the target of the chance-up performance is configured such that when the performance mode changes due to the chance-up performance, the execution time is longer than when the chance-up performance does not change the performance mode. there is Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With such a configuration, when the chance-up performance is executed, a period for executing the chance-up performance and its target performance (for example, a period for notifying the change and the performance mode after the change) is ensured. be able to.

In addition, if the effect execution time of the effect is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up effect, the execution timing of other effects will be affected, so the amount of data related to effect control will increase and the processing will become complicated. There is a risk. Moreover, since the variable time (that is, the total performance execution time) is fixedly fixed in advance for each variation pattern, there is a possibility that the performance will not be completed within the time or that the time will be left over. Therefore, in this example, by varying the execution period of the movable body presentation depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up presentation, the influence on other presentations is suppressed, and all presentations are made to fit within the time period without discomfort.

That is, in this example, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. The effect execution time T21 of the movable body effect shown in 4(A) is shorter than the effect execution time T12 of the movable body effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the effect execution time of the chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) is common.

As the movable body effect, for example, the movable body 32 is moved from the initial position to the effect position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and is controlled to be positioned at the effect position for a predetermined period, and the image display device is displayed during the predetermined period. 5, control is performed to display an effect image or the like so as to emphasize the movable body production (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may move at the production position). When performing control to move to a position, the rendering execution time of the movable body rendering can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is positioned at the rendering position. By adjusting the effect execution time of the movable body effect in this way, it is possible to cope with minute changes in the effect time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With such a configuration, the production execution time of the production is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up production, while preventing an increase in the amount of data related to the production control and complication of the processing, and making all the productions uncomfortable. can be completed within the time frame.

Note that the adjustment of the performance time may be performed by, for example, a performance other than the movable body performance. For example, if the variable display result is a loss and the movable object effect is not executed before the end of the variation, after the effect image related to super reach is restored to the normal background image before the end of the change, a decorative pattern indicating the loss is displayed. may be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the time for which the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, in this example, the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the execution time is varied according to the chance-up effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a longer execution time than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. Although the details will be described later, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a higher chance of winning than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. can increase With such a configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed in a suitable execution time, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

Also, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, another chance-up effect targeting another effect is not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the chance-up effect with different targets is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 030IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 030IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 030IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , A combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the medium pattern is a special pattern exclusively for pseudo-ren (characters such as "NEXT" are written and numbers are written) It also decides what is not possible to constitute a jackpot combination). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a variation pattern including super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). Then, if the variation pattern does not include super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes super reach (with chance up), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the stock effect (step 030IWS804). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode after changing the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS806). After that, the process moves to step 030IWS811. The details of steps 030IWS804, S805 and S806 will be described later.

At step 030IWS811, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern and the determined effect (step 030IWS811).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 030IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the process of step 030 IWS813, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content determined to be executed is realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the stock effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804) will be described.

At step 030 IWS804, for example, the stock effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, when the variation pattern is super reach A (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-4, PB2-4, the first stock effect pattern determination table (super reach A) shown in FIG. By referring to it, one of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the effect result and the second to third effect patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the effect result is determined.

Further, when the variation pattern is super reach B (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-5, PB2-5, refer to the second stock effect pattern determination table (super reach B) shown in FIG. 8-6(B). , 1st production pattern to stock 1 item (key) as a production result, 2nd to 3rd production patterns to stock 2 items (keys) as a production result, 3 items (keys) to be stocked as a production result. Any one of the fourth to fifth production patterns is determined.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock effect. For example, in the first effect pattern, At timing A, one item (key) is stocked, and at timings B and C, no item (key) is stocked. For example, in the fifth effect pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. Thus, in this example, an opportunity to stock one or more items (keys) is provided at each timing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), each effect pattern of the stock effect is configured so that the proportion determined at the time of the big win is different. That is, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the number of stocked items (keys) and the timing of stocking. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the stock effect.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) to (B), the super reach A and the super reach B are configured so that the effect pattern of the stock effect that can be determined is different. Specifically, at super reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and at super reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which type of super reach the stock effect is executed.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to (B), the item (key) is stocked at timing A (in other words, the stock effect is executed) regardless of the effect pattern. It is configured so that at least one item (key) is stocked when the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having no expectations for the stock performance or not paying attention to the stock performance due to the case where the items are not stocked even if the stock performance is executed. be able to.

In this example, since the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when the stock effect is not executed, the player expects the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right patterns are tense and the middle pattern is fluctuating in the image display device 5), an effect suggesting that the stock effect will be executed, and the execution You may make it perform the production|presentation which stirs whether it is done or not. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" as a medium symbol may be stopped to shift to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal ready-to-win state, the medium pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed, and after the screen is changed to the super ready-to-win (white out or the like to cover the display area of the image display device 5), the super Instead of the reach first half part (outpost production), it may be shifted to the stock production.

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS805) will be described.

At step 030 IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance increase), and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the first chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach A: one chance-up) shown in FIG. do.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the second chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach A: chance-up twice) shown in 7(B), one of the fifth to sixth effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the third chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach B: one-time chance-up) shown in 7(C), one of the first to fourth production patterns for performing one chance-up production is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the fourth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up twice) shown in 7(D), one of the fifth to seventh effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, With reference to the fifth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up 3 times) shown in 7(E), the eighth effect pattern of performing the chance-up effect three times is determined.

For example, in the first effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed once. Further, for example, in the eighth production pattern of the chance-up production, the production mode of the title display (production of displaying the title display) is changed, and the production mode of the dialogue display (dialogue display is displayed) is changed. and a chance-up effect for changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) are executed respectively.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up effect is executed to incite whether or not the chance-up effect is to be executed. There are two types of chance-up stimulating effects: one in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect, and the other in which the chance-up effect is not executed. ).

In the chance-up fanning effect (true), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole (entity) ) the image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up inciting effect (false), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole The (substantial) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting the keyhole (for example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is deleted.

In this example, the chance-up fanning effect (true) is always executed before the chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth effect pattern and the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect for displaying the dialogue display). However, the chance-up prompting effect (false) that is not executed as a result is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the effects the chance-up effect is to be executed. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the chance-up effect is not executed and the stocked item (key) remains, the chance-up effect (false) is executed. You may do so.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (E), each production pattern of the chance-up production is configured such that the ratio determined at the time of the big win is different (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is different). . With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. In particular, it is constructed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher as the timing of change as the object of the chance-up effect becomes later (that is, in the order of decorative pattern change>word display change>title display change). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing and which chance-up effect targeting which effect is executed.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is not executed in the case of super reach A, and can be executed only in the case of super reach B. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of super reach the chance-up effect is executed.

It should be noted that not only the examples shown in FIGS. 8-7, but also in any kind of super reach, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect displaying the decorative pattern) can be executed. may be In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect is configured to be executed a maximum of three times. Further, the chance-up performance for the active display can be executed at both the second timing and the fourth timing so that the chance-up performance is executed up to five times. good too.

Next, the details of the processing (step 030IWS806) of determining the effect mode after the change of the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process will be described.

In step 030 IWS 806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the title display (effect for displaying the title display), the title display change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change. Further, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the active display (effect of displaying the active display), the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B) is changed. Refer to it to determine the pattern of change. In addition, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C) to determine the pattern of change. Also, if it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern), the decorative pattern change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change.

In this example, title display (effect of displaying title display), active display (effect of displaying active display), dialogue display (effect of displaying dialogue display) and decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying decorative pattern) , the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color tone of the effect image related to the effect. For example, it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue>normal color (white).

When the title display change pattern is determined to be the first change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the title display changes to the normal color ( white) to green.

Also, when the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the first change pattern, the active display changes from normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of Super Reach, and is determined to be the second change pattern. In this case, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, and if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing. If the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that changes the pending display (and active display), the effect pattern determined as the pre-reading notice effect at the time of the start winning (for example, the change timing and the display mode after the change are determined) ), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed.

When the change pattern of dialogue display is determined to be the first change pattern, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes to the normal color ( white) to green, and if the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first variation pattern, the decorative design changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the second variation pattern is determined, the decorative design changes to the normal color. The color (white) changes to red, and when the third change pattern is determined, the decorative pattern changes from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect, the tendency of the effect mode after the change is different according to the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up effect for the active display is configured such that the third timing after the first timing is more likely to change to a more expected effect mode. In addition, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns is executed later than the chance-up effect for title display, active display, and dialogue display, and it is easy to change to a production mode with high expectations. is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at the earlier timing suggests that the expectation is higher than the color displayed after the change at the later timing, it will be displayed after the change at the later timing. The effect mode (color) to be displayed may be re-determined so as not to cause a decline in the degree of expectation.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of a super ready-to-win effect including a stock effect and a chance-up effect will be described. 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of stock effects. In addition, in FIGS. 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock production (5th production pattern))
In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. A stock effect of the fifth effect pattern is shown.

Specifically, when the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, a decorative design showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, at the start timing of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the image display device 5 displays the title display of the stock effect "KEY STOCK" and "TIME". Note that the display mode of the title display may indicate the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock effect to be started later, or that many items (keys) are to be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in normal color (white), but when displayed in red, it suggests that there are more items (keys) stocked than when displayed in normal color (white). may be made.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during a special effect, etc., the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display, and corresponds to the special symbol. A small pattern KZ and a reserved memory count HS indicating the reserved memory count are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Next, when the stock effect is started, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "key stock TIME" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress. is displayed. Further, at timing A of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. .

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at the timing A. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 9(3), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 1" indicating that one key is stocked as an item, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), one key moves from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen and is stocked. A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the character A rides on a swing in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a display is performed in which the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 decreases. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 indicating the number of keys currently stocked is displayed.

Next, at the timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. . In this example, an effect display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is performed at timing A, timing B, and timing C of the stock effect, but the character A poses differently. Therefore, even if the effect for prompting the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times, the interest of each timing can be improved without boring the player.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, the key is not stocked at the timing B. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. 8-9 (7 ), an image with a close-up face of character A, a character display of "!?" The image shown is not displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect such as displaying a character image instead of the key when the key is not stocked, it is possible to alleviate the regret that the key was not stocked. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is equivalent to the case where three keys are stocked. Therefore, if the key is not stocked even if the button is pressed for a period of time, the presentation becomes redundant, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease. Therefore, when the key is not stocked in this way, the character image is displayed instead to liven up the presentation, so that the stock presentation is not lowered even if the stock number is small. It should be noted that the character image to be displayed when not stocked is not limited to one type, and may be varied according to the type of Super Reach to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the future development from the displayed character image, and to give the character image a dramatic meaning.

Since the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is performed when the key is not stocked (that is, indicating that the key is not stocked), the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is displayed. After the displayed image is erased, an effect display in which the stock effect progresses as shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the effect display when the item is stocked as shown in FIG. 8-9 (3) and the effect display when the item is not stocked as shown in FIG. A short period is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying an unfavorable effect for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed, and at timing C of the stock effect, the push button 31B is pressed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10). A character A prompting an operation, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at the timing C. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 10 (11), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 2" indicating that two keys are stocked as items, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display in which two keys are stocked by moving from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen (for example, a key flying from the left back side of the screen) A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

In this example, when executing the super reach with chance up, first, the stock effect is executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the first half of the super ready-to-win, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which the character A and the enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is mainly executed, and a chance-up effect is additionally executed. After that, in the second half of Super Reach, a battle effect is executed in which character A and enemy character B exchange swords. In addition, when executing super reach without chance increase, in the first half of super reach, an outpost production such as dialogue production in which character A and enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is executed, and in the second half of super reach, A battle effect is executed in which the character A and the enemy character B exchange swords.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the battle card for the battle production is "Character A VS Enemy Character B". are different) are provided, and the battle card is determined according to the type of super reach. In other words, the type of super ready-to-win is notified by displaying a battle card with a battle effect triggered by the pressing operation of the push button 31B. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation and tension when performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the types of super reach, the types of characters on the team side and characters on the enemy side may differ according to the degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, for example, if the production stage is configured to transition according to the game period or game state such as the number of fluctuations, the character associated with the production stage in advance may be one of the enemy characters (the production stage may be any one of a plurality of enemy characters associated with , or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock production (first production pattern))
Next, the stock effect of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, and one key is stocked as a result will be described. do.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transition of FIGS. 8-9 (1) to (8), as shown in FIG. A stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is a stock key is displayed, and an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (10), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (11). will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period passes), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

(Outline of Super Reach first half and second half)
Next, the outline of the effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach will be described. FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an outline of effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach. In addition, in FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introduction part (stock effect) ends and the first half of Super Reach begins, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1), the title display of Super Reach B with the words "Death Fight between Two People" is displayed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12(1), in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 stocked in the stock effect are displayed. In this example, it is assumed that three keys are stocked in the stock effect in advance, and the three keys are displayed in a manner of moving around the mini-character A. In this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as the mini key image 030IWG10 or the key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design showing "6" is displayed, and the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display. , and a small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

8-12(2), the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after the dialogue image 030IWG20 of "It's a game" is displayed, As shown in 12(3), the line image 030IWG20 of "I'll get back to you" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(4), the character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, and the dialogue image 030IWG20 saying "I won't hold back" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (2) to (4), when the outpost effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed on the image display device 5. An effect display is performed in which the ends of the display area are moved. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Here, when the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed in a manner overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. be done. At this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding one key is displayed beside the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Such an effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is the dialogue effect.

Next, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. ) As an effect display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12(7).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the dialog image 030IWG20 changes from normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12(8). With such an effect display, the effect mode of the dialogue effect changes as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the super reach first half part (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the super reach second half part begins, character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (9). A battle production where swords are exchanged begins.

Then, when the character A wins against the enemy character A, the characters "Victory" are displayed as shown in FIG. A combination of "666" decorative patterns is displayed.

(Chance up production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in FIG. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18. FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18 also show portions of the chance-up effect that are omitted from FIG. 8-12.

FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect for active display. In addition, in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a prelude effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images. Although the details will be described later, the effect image related to the outpost effect is hidden by the effect image related to the chance-up effect at the timings of (13) to (14) in FIG. 8-15.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-14(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH targeted for the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14(5). Then, an effect display is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect and the target effect of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(7), a keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This kind of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up boosting effect being executed is the chance-up boosting effect (true) and that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-15 (9), and then reduced as shown in FIG. 8-15 (10) It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 while (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11, thereby enhancing the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, as an effect display of the key being stuck in the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15(12).

When an effect display is performed in which the key turns through the keyhole (ie, the key is unlocked), as shown in FIG. A character display is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the character A is displayed close up together with the effect image covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, whereby the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the sense of discomfort.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the character A and the character display of "pending rank up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost production is displayed, and the active display AH is in the silhouette state. , and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

In this example, when the chance-up effect for the active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 030IWC10>effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect>active display AH>image related to the outpost effect are displayed in higher layers in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is erased, and the active display AH changed from normal color (white) to blue is displayed. In addition, since one of the stocks has been released and the item (key) has been consumed by the chance-up effect for the active display, the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 that moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10 is one. It's getting less.

In this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed when the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is being executed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is acted on by the key image 030IWG12. to run. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Execute the chance-up production at . With such a configuration, when the chance-up effect using the key image 030IWG12 is executed, the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and turns around (that is, the key is opened). It is possible to enhance the performance effect and improve the amusement.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (for example, see FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when 030IWG11 is displayed, the chance-up effect for other effects is not executed. For example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, the chance-up effect for the dialogue display is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (that is, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10) are moved and displayed to create a chance-up effect. is executed, an effect display is performed in which the character throws the key into the keyhole. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A-image 030IWC10, and when the chance-up effect is executed, , to stop its operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Also, in this example, the appearance of the key is different between when the key is stocked and when the key is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right of the display area in the stock effect, and as shown in FIG. The display size of the key image is smaller in the latter case than when the key image is displayed so as to move. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the key image easily visible in the stock effect in which the key is the main focus, and to prevent the key from standing out too much in the outpost effect. For example, when the key is stocked in the stock effect, and when the character throws the key toward the keyhole in the chance up effect (the most enlarged state at the beginning), the display size of the key image is larger in the latter. You may make it With such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater impact when releasing the stock than when the key is stocked. Further, by giving an impact, even if the performance targeted for the chance-up performance has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to impress the player that it is a desirable performance.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up effect for decorative symbols will be described. FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects for decorative symbols. In addition, in FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an outpost effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position covering part of the upper display area of the image display device 5 .

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-16(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed. Note that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed in the chance-up effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in FIGS. It has a transparency that makes it possible to visually recognize the effect image), and the content of the super reach (that is, the outpost effect) is not hindered as much as possible even while the chance-up fan effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (5). Thus, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed to move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette state, and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-16(5) to 8-16(6), when changing the pose of mini-character A, the silhouette image is displayed once, and then the silhouette image is displayed. , the mini-character A image in the pose after the change from . In this way, instead of using material data that changes the pose of a mini character by moving it, the material data is simplified by switching the image with the silhouette image in between, thereby reducing the man-hours and costs required for production. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), a keyhole (substantial) image is placed near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). 030IWG11 is displayed. Through such presentation display, it becomes clear that the chance-up fanning presentation being executed is the chance-up fanning presentation (true), and that the object of the chance-up fanning presentation is the decoration pattern.

In this example, when executing the chance-up effect targeting dialogue effects, as shown in FIG. When executing the chance-up effect for the pattern, as shown in FIG. A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the corresponding position). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is preferably displayed according to the characteristics of the target effect. can do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), and then as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of moving away).

8-17 (11), a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as an effect display that the key is stuck in the keyhole, and an effect that the key turns in the keyhole (that is, the key is unlocked). As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17(12).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed, the left decoration design starts rotating in the left decoration design display area 5L, and the right decoration design is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the right decorative pattern starts rotating in the pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14), the character A is displayed close-up to hide the effect image related to the outpost effect, and the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the discomfort of being

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of characters A and B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the left ornament rotates to a position superimposed on the image. An effect display is performed in which the pattern and the right decorative pattern move. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left decorative pattern and right decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), when the glowing effect image around the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is erased, the normal color (white) changes to gold and the characters "GOLD" are displayed. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern with the display are displayed, and the effect display is performed in which the rotation of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining outpost effect is performed. executed. Since all the stocked keys have been used due to the execution of the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are not displayed thereafter, but a message indicating that they will not be displayed is displayed. No special effects are performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini-key image 030IWG10, which is no longer used, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of which production is the target of the chance-up production), at least a part of the chance-up promotion production is It is carried out in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5), the keyhole (suggestion ) The image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common mode in which it is initially displayed in full screen and then reduced in size. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, that is, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, and which effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can draw attention to.

In this example, in the chance-up effect, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of the type of target effect), the image is displayed at a common display position to be the target effect. It informs that the production mode of will change. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "holding rank up" or "design rank up" are displayed, and the production mode is Notify you of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the target effect changes in the chance-up effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15) and FIGS. It is not displayed at the timing when the mode of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the target effect is changed by the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the effect image related to at least a part of the multiple types of effects targeted for the chance-up effect has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. high. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some effects in any situation. In addition, for effects images other than some effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game such as dialogue display and title display), display priority is given to the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image. By making the intensity lower, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, an effect image or a character covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, a "suspended rank It is possible to display notification images such as character display such as "up" or "symbol rank up". Then, a production pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to FIG. In addition, a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the characters and the character display of "pattern rank up" remain), and when the notification image is displayed, the effect of the target effect is changed. Effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), the pattern in which the active display mode changes after the effect image, character, and character display of “pending rank up” are erased) , the chance-up effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the presentation mode of the target presentation changes by displaying the notification image, and the chance-up presentation can be suitably performed by the presentation pattern corresponding to the target presentation. can be executed. Especially for the former, by seamlessly increasing the chance while the notification image is being displayed (that is, changing the effect mode of the target effect), it is possible to make the effect more flashy. By performing a chance up (that is, a change in the effect mode of the target effect) after is erased, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to the effect control.

In addition, in this example, when the notification image is displayed, the effect pattern of changing the effect mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is different from when the notification image is displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the performance. Specifically, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation of a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the notification image uses an image that can specify which effect mode of the effect has changed, and is different from the effect image related to the effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the effects has changed in the effect mode.

Further, in this example, the notification image displayed during execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner covering the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is There are cases where the image is covered by the notification image and cases where the image is not covered, and the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit than the former. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. "Rank up" is displayed, but this notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decoration pattern. Then, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the chance-up effect, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the relevant effect image is not covered, and the latter is more within one variable display period than the former. The rate of execution at later timing is high. Specifically, the timing of execution of the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes is later than that of the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in accordance with the time when the expectations of the player are high.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the effect image is not covered. Switch to an image and display it. Specifically, when the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern is executed, after the character A image is displayed as shown in FIGS. ) to FIG. 8-18 (17), an image in which character A and character B stand side by side is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated chance-up production.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (fake) will be described. FIG. 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (false). In addition, in FIG. 8-19, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

FIG. 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the outpost effect in the first half of the super reach is started and the chance-up effect for the active display is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-19(1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are placed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up effect is executed. It is redisplayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are the targets of the chance-up effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern). The end of the display area of the image display device 5 is moved so as to pass through the display position. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-19 (1) and (2), before the dialogue effect is started, so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed (or the position where display is scheduled). An effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move. With such a configuration, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, it is desired to execute a chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position. The expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement can be improved.

In this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect are displayed at various positions such as the upper, lower, and lower right portions of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are Move through the position. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the position where the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are moved and displayed, and whether the effect displayed at that position is the target of the chance-up effect. .

Further, in this example, after executing one chance-up effect targeting one effect, when executing another chance-up effect targeting another effect, one chance-up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time elapses. After that, another chance-up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one chance-up effect and another chance-up effect to make each stand out, and as shown in FIGS. It is possible to secure a period during which the key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image The 030IWC10 has a lower display priority than the effect images (for example, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern, etc.) related to the effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect, and is displayed in a lower layer than them. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are not limited to such a configuration, and are among the effects that can be the target of the chance-up effect when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed on a lower layer than the effect image (for example, decoration pattern) related to some effects, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect image (for example, active display and dialogue display) related to other effects. good too.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during execution of Super Ready-to-Wear, and are effect images related to Super-Reach (for example, character images related to Senseki effect). ), but when the chance-up effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image relating to super reach is displayed so as not to be obstructed. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move at the ends of the display area without moving in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is not superimposed and displayed on the part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent interference with the super reach (outpost effect) while displaying the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (false) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3), when the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to approach the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. do.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the moving speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are set when the target effect to be used is not specified (or when there is a chance When it is specified (or when the chance-up effect is not being executed), it is a high-speed movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effect.

Next, an effect display in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks is started, but as shown in FIG. ) The image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "?" indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 has been deleted is displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up fanning effect is a chance-up fanning effect (false).

8-19(5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. It will be fixed. In this example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and after the chance-up effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. , displayed in a common initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the chance-up fanning effect (false) has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of restarting. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 can be displayed only once corresponding to the same presentation. For example, when a chance-up promotion effect (or chance-up promotion effect (false)) that agitates whether or not a chance-up production effect for dialogue display is executed once, the dialogue display is displayed after that. Even if it is, the chance-up fanning production targeting the dialogue display is not executed again. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestion effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are partly protruded outside the display area (that is, partly not displayed) when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. good too. With such a configuration, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with other effects such as effect images.

Further, for example, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5, an effect not targeted for the chance-up effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effects performed when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Also, in this example, since the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, the number of times it has been executed may be recognized. For example, when the first chance-up effect is executed, an effect image simulating a blue flame is displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and when the second chance-up effect is executed, the effect image is displayed. When the effect image changes to green and the third chance-up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the chance-up has been performed even after the chance-up effect is finished and the related effect image is erased.

Next, the keyhole (suggestion) image and the keyhole (substantial) image for each effect of the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (entity) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are a plurality of types of effects to be targeted for the chance-up effect, and the display sizes of the effect images related to the respective effects are different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in such a manner that the keyhole (entity) image is displayed at the position where the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (substantial) image is configured to vary according to the target rendering.

For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. The display size is smaller than the image 030IWG11. With such a configuration, the player can predict the target effect of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby improving the interest and target effect. By displaying the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 in a display size suitable for the display size, it is possible to produce a presentation that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common size regardless of the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. . After that, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed in a display size corresponding to the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

As described above, the characterizing portion 030IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in means 1 to 29 below.

(Means 1) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that suggests control to be in an advantageous state and has a plurality of different expectations depending on the performance mode. Types of suggestive effects (for example, effect of displaying title display in a predetermined mode, effect of displaying active display in a predetermined mode, dialogue effect of displaying dialogue display in a predetermined mode, display of decorative patterns in a predetermined mode) a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and a displayed special image. , a special effect (for example, changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue and a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect that changes to a normal image), and the special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed. Then, a special effect is executed in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, the active display AH or the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.). According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest.

(Means 2) The special correspondence image is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the suggested effect being executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)), and the special correspondence image is displayed, a special effect for suggestive effects other than the suggestive effect corresponding to the special correspondence image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, , The chance-up effect for dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the special corresponding image is displayed.

(Means 3) A special correspondence image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up stimulating effect (or a chance (False)) is executed once, the chance-up boosting effect targeting the dialogue display is not executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed after that). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes due to the special effect, the effect mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed later is more advantageous (See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing the special performance will be executed, and to prevent the player who expects the changing timing from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display stimulus effect executing means capable of executing a display stimulus effect (for example, a chance-up stimulus effect) for inciting whether or not the special corresponding image is displayed is provided, and the display stimulus effect executing means Regardless of the display position, it is possible to execute the display effect in a common manner (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 2, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed up on the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner, even when the target effects are different). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special correspondence image is displayed, that is, whether or not the special effect is executed, and also to pay attention to which suggestive effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can be made

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed in a display size larger than that of the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while being reduced (for example, FIG. 8- 15 (9) to (12), as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 moves from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Since it is displayed, it is initially displayed in a display size larger than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11, and then while being reduced (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away), it is stuck in the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11. (displayed as rotating). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special correspondence image, and to enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute the special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time according to the special effect to be executed (for example, in FIG. 8-4 (A) As shown, the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern has a longer effect execution time than the dialogue display or the chance-up effect for the dialogue display. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 8) The suggestive effect has a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the special effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B) Thus, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when the special performance is executed, it is possible to secure a period during which the special performance and the suggestive performance targeted for the special performance are performed.

(Means 9) The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a title display) and a second suggestive effect having a smaller display size than the first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying dialogue). ), and the special effect executing means, when the suggestive effect is being executed, performs the special effect in a manner of displaying the special correspondence image at the position where the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed. It is executable (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and the suggestion effect to be the target of the special effect is the first suggestion. When it is the performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestion performance, and when it is the second suggestion performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the display size of the second suggestion performance. The second display size is smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) is , smaller than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by enabling the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special correspondence image is displayed, and at the same time, the display size suitable for the target effect can be obtained. By displaying the special correspondence image on the screen, it is possible to achieve a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

(Means 10) Suggestive effect executing means provides a specific suggestive effect (for example, a effect of displaying dialogue) that displays a effect image at a first position, and a second position that is closer to the end of the display area of the display means than the first position. A special suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern) in which the effect image is displayed at a position (for example, a position near the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5) can be executed, and the special effect executing means is a specified When the suggestive effect is executed, the special correspondence image is displayed at approximately the center position of the effect image displayed at the first position (for example, approximately at the center of the dialog image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. (a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position), and when the special suggestion effect is executed, the position shifted from the center position of the effect image displayed at the second position toward the center of the display area of the display means is specially handled. Display an image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), display from the center position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C) A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the area). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display a special correspondence image according to the feature of the target suggestive effect.

(Means 11) The special effect includes a notification effect in which a special image is displayed at a common display position regardless of the position at which the special corresponding image is displayed to notify that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes (for example, , as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "pending rank up" and "symbol rank up" are displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special correspondence image is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted in the special effect changes (for example, FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the mode of active display or decorative pattern changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner of moving past the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4) and FIGS. 8-19 (1) to (2), the dialogue The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the speech image related to the effect is displayed (or the position where the display is scheduled). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectation that the special performance targeting the suggestive performance of the position where the special image is displayed is executed. It can enhance interest and improve interest.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-14 (5), FIG. 8-16 ( 5), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH or the decoration pattern display area, which is the target of the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special effect and the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (14) and 8-19 (2), The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, the active display, the dialogue display, and the decoration pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than them). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect executing means can execute another special effect targeting another suggestive effect after executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, and the other special effect is , one special effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one special effect and another special effect to make each of them stand out, and to secure a period during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image is moved and displayed is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when the suggestive effect to be used is not specified (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the movement speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are slow movement when the effect to be used is not specified. is fast when you are on it). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 18) When the special image is moved and displayed, the additional image is added, the additional image is also moved and displayed, and the additional image operates when the special effect is executed (for example, FIG. 8-14 ( 1) to (8), FIGS. 8-16 (1) to (8), and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is moved and displayed together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and the chance-up effect is performed. When executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner of moving around the additional image, and the movement is stopped when the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), FIG. As shown in 8-16 (1) to (6) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and a chance-up effect is executed. sometimes it stops working). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 20) The special image and the additional image are displayed during execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state, and have a higher display priority than the effect image related to the specific effect. Displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost production in the first half of Super Reach). ), and when the specific effect is being executed and the special effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility (for example, FIG. 8 -12 (1) to (4), as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move the part, and is not displayed superimposed on the face etc. of the character image related to the outpost production). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special image and the additional image from interfering with the specific effect while displaying the special image and the additional image.

(Means 21) Suggesting that a special effect will be executed, a first special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (true)) in which the special effect is executed after the effect, and suggesting that the special effect will be executed. and a special suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a second special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (false)) in which the special effect is not executed after the effect, and the special image is provided with the second special suggestive effect executed. After that, it is displayed again in the initial position (for example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the chance-up effect is displayed (false) is executed and appears in the common initial position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the second special suggestive effect has ended, and to express the meaning of the restart. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

(Means 22) The special effect executing means can execute the special effect a plurality of times, and when executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, another A special effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special performance being executed.

(Means 23) A rendering image (for example, a decoration pattern) related to at least a part of the suggestive rendering out of a plurality of types of suggestive rendering has display priority over the special image even when the special image acts on the special correspondence image. high degree (see, for example, Fig. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images other than some suggestive effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue display and title display), when the special image acts on the special corresponding image, Also, by lowering the display priority, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect executing means can display a specific image when executing the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. The effect image that covers the effect image related to the character and the text display of "pending rank up" and "pattern rank up" are displayed), and the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted when the specific image is displayed The first effect pattern to be changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and the "symbol rank up" display remain. pattern), and a second effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a pattern in which the mode of the active display changes after the character and the display of "pending rank up" are erased), special effects can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes by displaying the specific image, and to suitably execute the special presentation according to the presentation pattern corresponding to the suggested presentation to be targeted. can do.

(Means 25) The degree of expectation that the special effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed according to the first effect pattern than when the special effect is executed according to the second effect pattern (for example, the mode of decoration pattern The chance-up effect in which the active display mode changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to specify which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed, and an image different from the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-15 (13 ), as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost production is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image. ” and “symbol rank up” are displayed), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is hidden by the specific image and a suggestive effect that is not hidden by the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-15 While the active display AH is covered as shown in (13), the decoration pattern is not covered as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13)). The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the suggestive performance to be hidden (for example, the chance-up performance in which the mode of decoration pattern changes is higher than the chance-up performance in which the mode of active display changes). (see Figure 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the flashiness of the special presentation, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 28) The special effect of the first effect pattern is executed at a later timing within one variable display period at a higher rate than the special effect of the second effect pattern. The changing chance-up effect is executed later than the chance-up effect in which the mode of active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect according to the time when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When the special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14) 8-17(15) to 8-18(17), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated special production.

Further, in the case of executing a notice effect such as a suggestive effect or a special effect, an image is generated and displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal based on the data stored in the image storage means. Drawing of images and specific control of images in multiple layers will be described in detail.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the special prize winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which a "big hit" is likely to occur in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbols, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 11, for example. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery processing in step S904. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and step S906 are executed. The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, set the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and allow the interrupt (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 10 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 15(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the set value of the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as the reference value of the loss with time reduction (reference value with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 17 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S90175 described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained.

The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
It has a display area that can display an image, and game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the number of first special figure pending storage, the number of second special figure pending storage, and a small display area smaller than the decorative pattern) a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, decorative pattern or background image) displayed in the display area and a display image for the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, layer 1 image drawing area, layer 2 image drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area shown in FIG. 19-5) etc.), and can generate an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
Effect execution means capable of executing the effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIGS. 19 to 17);
with
The storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (for example, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of the characteristic portion 006SG) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic portion 006SG, the position above or below the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information). The part where the image data for the
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 23). As above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. By doing so, as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays a specific effect for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestive effect in the characteristic portion 006SG, a reach suggestive effect in the modification 006SG-1 production, revival production in modification 006SG-2, pre-reading announcement production in modification 006SG-3, promotion production in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion production and temporary stop notification production in modification 006SG-6) can be executed. be,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position only by using the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Since the specific performance can be executed by displacing it to two positions, the amount of data to be stored in the storage means for executing the specific performance can be suppressed as compared with the case of executing the specific performance using dedicated image data. .

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-26, the first interface The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area with the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image. You can prevent it from getting lost.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
At least part of the game-related information is displayed in an area that overlaps with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect). The part that is displayed in duplicate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displacement specific image, the game-related information is displayed overlapping the displacement specific image without being displaced, so that the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to recognize game-related information without

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I includes the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image. can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 4,
Equipped with game identification information variable display execution means (for example, first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 11) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbols) ,
The production executing means is
In the first area within the display area, it is possible to variably display the identification information for effect according to the variably display of the identification information for game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-21, the image display device 5 In the central part of the display area, the part where the variable display of the decorative pattern can be executed according to the variable display of the special pattern),
In a second area within the display area different from the first area and smaller than the first area, variable display of reduced identification information in accordance with variable display of the game identification information can be executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion that can perform variable display of small symbols according to variable display of special symbols),
The display image of the identification information for effect is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visual recognition state changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition, which is less likely to be visually recognized by the player than the first visual recognition state, in response to the execution of the specific effect. state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 The part where the visibility decreases by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area of ),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visible state does not change from the first visible state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, the display image shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-23 As shown, the small pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative pattern, it does not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when executing the development suggestive effect, so the visibility does not decrease. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the specific effect, the visual recognition state of the identification information for effect changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition state, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved, and the effect of the specific effect can be reduced by executing the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during execution of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The display areas include a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 19-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area shown in FIG. 19-31). 006SG005B) and
The production executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion that displays decorative patterns and a background image over the area), and as the displacement specific image, an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed (for example, the As shown in 19-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left and right direction),
When displacing the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area, the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 display an effect image (for example, the cut effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 19-31) different from the image displayed in the specific display area;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction as displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and displacing the second specific display area in a first direction. The display area can be displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. a portion that moves the upper region 006SG005T upward and a portion that moves the lower region 006SG005B downward, as shown in FIG. 19-31 (E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the displacement of the second specific display area in the second direction opposite to the first direction. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, it is possible to further improve the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The amount of displacement of the first specific display area and the amount of displacement of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are used as the pre-reading preview effect). and are moved in opposite directions, the portion where the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B differs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The effect image is placed on a special display layer in which the placed image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the pattern and background image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as the specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing the specific image and the effect image. It is possible to further improve the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 9,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
The effect execution means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H can be displayed in two colors of blue and red, As shown in FIG. 19-33, the portion where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in which color. 19-33, a portion where the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on which color the cut effect image 006SG005S is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
The specific effect is a effect in which the specific image changes step by step (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in the development suggestive effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 19-27, the part where the moving amount of the displayed image increases step by step, and the decoration pattern inside is expanded step by step in the revival effect of the modification 006SG-2 as shown in FIG. 19-27. As shown in Fig. 19-35, the distortion of the decoration pattern and the background image is gradually increased in the promotion effect of modification 006SG-5. the part where
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific effect by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIGS. In the production, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is gradually moved upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, As shown in FIGS. 19-27, in the resurrection effect of Modified Example 006SG-2, the pieces that make up the inner decorative pattern are gradually moved from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area. The part that moves, the part where the decoration pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of modification 006SG-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect can be emphasized, the effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-28, a portion in which the decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific effect is a effect in which the number of the displayed image fragments increases step by step (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments that make up the decoration pattern inside are displayed in the progress of the revival effect). The portion that increases step by step according to
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces increase step by step.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases step by step (for example, in the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, the image display device 5 The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area increases step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases step by step, so that the player's attention can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
The storage means can store a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information with different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion where a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206),
Depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, in the variable display with the super reach fluctuation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R to the third step is used, in the variable display with the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage and the second stage is used, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state differs according to the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect interest of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 15,
The plurality of display position displacement information includes first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. In the variable display with the variation pattern of , the displacement image data for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage), and the specific image is changed from the first mode to the third mode. Second display position change information that does not change between two modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-22, in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or displacement image data for sliding movement to the second stage) and
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common changing portion that causes the image processing means to change the specific image from the first mode to the second mode (for example, FIG. 19-21 and FIG. 19-22, the case of using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide up to the third stage, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, In the case of using displacement image data in which the image of the right area 006SG005R slides up to the first step, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide up to the first stage are common. When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid to the second stage. In the case of using the displacement image data, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as the specific effect, so that the effect interest of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The production executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion that displays decorative patterns and a background image over the area), and as the displacement specific image, an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed (for example, the As shown in 19-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left and right direction),
After displaying the displacement specific image, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 19-31 (D) and 19-31 (E) , the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundaries between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved upward and downward, respectively),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the production effect of the specific production. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 17,
A boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one of a plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 19-31(D) and 19-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves rightward and the lower region 006SG005B moves leftward, but the upper The boundary between the region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a portion that moves vertically),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can further enhance the effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
At least in the specific display layer, an image can be arranged over an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-39, a promotion effect is executed At this time, the decorative pattern drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and part of the background image is displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. part to place),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as the specific effect, it is possible to reduce the risk of inappropriate display being performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the image to be displaced is enlarged so that the horizontal width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying the image for displacement to the entire image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the image for displacement is applied is Only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5 may not be displaced.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
The effect executing means is capable of enlarging an image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, according to the progress of the promotion effect). stepwise enlargement of the decorative pattern drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, As shown in modification 006SG-3, the portion where the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without making the player feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side),
at least part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area when the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area; are the same (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after being moved to the left) at least a portion of which is common to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the specific effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to form 21 or 22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before execution of the preview effect, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a preview effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 23,
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' can display a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image)),
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-45 (B), a portion that can display the preview effect during variable display with a stereoscopic image),
When executing the specific effect, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the image displayed as a suggestive effect is displayed as a planar image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the player can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and since the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, the specific effect can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 24,
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when executing the specific effect, it is possible to preferably execute the stereoscopic effect.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 24 or 25,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the stereoscopic effect as an introductory effect of the specific effect in a period prior to the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the specific effect will be executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with a effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12 , the effect control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in a built-in ROM 121 and receives effect control commands via the input circuit 260 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes a display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 based on the effect control command. process to make it possible.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the display control unit 123 selects characters (image data such as people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) as image element data used as sprite images, decorative designs, and backgrounds. Image, first reserved memory display area 006SG005D for identifiably displaying the number of first special figure reserved memories as game-related information in this feature section 006SG and second reserved memory for identifiably displaying the number of second special figure reserved memories A first interface image 006SG005I for displaying a display area 006SG005U, a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns, and other data are stored in a CGROM 205 and displayed together with an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs to the display control unit 123 a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 storing image data according to the received effect control command. The CGROM 205 pre-stores character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, person, characters, graphics and symbols (including decorative patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the characteristic portion 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying it to the displacement target image to be described later. there is The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in accordance with a command from the effect control CPU 120 . Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 that stores various settings of the display control unit 123, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, such as the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the scaling ratio, data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.), a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area (described later) in the VRAM area, and CG data stored in the CGROM 205 are transferred to the VRAM area. A data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, and video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area (described later) of the VRAM area. The integrated circuit includes a display control unit 213 that outputs signals and synchronization signals, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5, and the like.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and the infrared camera 60 is also connected to the system bus and the CG bus. An image processing DSP 264 is connected. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to CGROM 205 via CG bus interface 204 . A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus.

The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus and can access the system register 202. FIG. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that they can access the CGROM 205 and attribute register 203 .

A VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123 , and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209 . The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores commands for initial setting, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores interrupt signal output commands, which will be described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and an arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing areas, etc., a data transfer register for storing transfer source addresses and transfer destination addresses at the time of data transfer, and a display register for storing display image creation areas in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 at each start of V blank (image update cycle), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic portion 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 19-2(a) and 19-2(b), in this characteristic portion 006SG, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. is being generated. In the VRAM area, the layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the image of each layer and the image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed (see FIG. 19-5). Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 19-5(A) and 19-5(B), the layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 1 image and the layer 2 image are drawn and arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image is arranged. The VRAM area also includes a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image, which will be described later, to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

As shown in FIGS. 19-2 (b) and 19-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is displayed in a lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 so that the number of the first special figure reserved storage can be specified. In the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that displays the number of second special reserved memory so that it can be specified, This is a drawing area for drawing the second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns whose display area is smaller than that of the decoration pattern.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display region of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

In this characteristic part 006SG, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J) are set to have the highest display priority. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 , and the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

It should be noted that the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area in this characteristic portion 006SG have a transparency of 0% in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image and the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of , or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a method of displacing the image to be displaced in the characteristic portion 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 19-3(A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. Each of these R value and G value takes a value in the range of 1-256.

Taking one pixel A out of these plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 starts from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image and uses the R value and the G value of the pixel A to change the position in the displacement target image. , the position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward direction) of the X-axis. is specified as the coordinate (position) of the X-axis direction of the pixel X, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image to the positive direction (right direction) of the X-axis The position moved toward is specified as the coordinate of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

If the G value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the Y-axis coordinate of pixel X is the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y-axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced. If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward direction) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the Y axis direction of pixel X is specified as the coordinates (position) of The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the G values.

Then, after specifying the position of the pixel X in the image to be displaced, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the image to be displaced. That is, the pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to the pixel A. FIG. That is, in this characteristic portion 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to a position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G value of the pixel A can be displaced. It is also possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to pixel A, to the position corresponding to pixel A by adjusting the values to the same value.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process on a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-3B, the displacement image is divided into a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image image d), and apply each region to the image to be displaced to generate the displaced image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 19-4(A) to 19-4(C), the region constituting the displacement image has an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127. A displacement image a, a displacement image b having an R value of 128 and a G value of 1 from 129 to 256, an R value of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128 An image c for displacement and an image d for displacement having an R value of 1 from 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 are provided, and an image of a triple circle is set as an image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 19-4(D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range shifted downward by the G value difference from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. to the display range of . Further, as shown in FIG. 19-4(E), for the displacement image b, the range shifted upward by the G value difference from the corresponding position of the displacement image b in the displacement target image is displayed in the displacement image. Specify a range. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-4(F), with respect to the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range shifted to the left of the R value difference from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-4(G), with respect to the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position shifted to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is Specify the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R value and the G value of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is divided into the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d. By displacing the image c and the image d for displacement, a displaced image as shown in FIG. 19-4(H) is generated.

In this characteristic portion 006SG, one of the R value and the G value of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set to a fixed value. Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly demarcated, the present invention is not limited to this. By gradually changing the R value and G value of pixels near each boundary of the image c and the displacement image d, it is possible to generate a gradation-like image as the displacement image.

FIG. 19-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature part 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 19-6(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-6(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 19-6(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 19-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 19-7, in this characteristic portion 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 19-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this characterizing part 006SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 006SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 006SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 006SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 006SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

FIG. 19-9(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic part 006SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in this feature part 006SG will be described using FIG. 19-9 (B). "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The high-accuracy control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big hit is one of the probability variable jackpot A to the probability variable jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so the jackpot game state changes from the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state that occurs continuously without intervening.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 19-10 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this characteristic portion 006SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this characteristic portion 006SG, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach variation patterns are provided. More than one type or only one type may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this characteristic part 006SG is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-2) that the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach α, As the variation patterns, there are provided a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big win and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is not.

As shown in FIG. 19-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this characteristic portion 006SG is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes high, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. In other words, the super reach β variation pattern is set so that the degree of expectation of a big win that the variable display result is "big win" is higher than that of the super reach α variation pattern.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 006SG, as described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

It should be noted that the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the variation pattern of super reach (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this characteristic portion 006 are, during variable display, It is also a variation pattern that executes a development suggestive production to a reach production of super reach after reaching is established. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach production after the execution of the development suggestion production, while the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win is executed after execution of the development suggestive effect.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed during variable display , After the reach is established, the form of executing the development suggestive effect to the reach effect of the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the normal reach and the variation pattern of the super reach are: A variation pattern may be provided in which the development suggesting production is not executed. In addition, when the development suggestive effect is executed, the ratio of development to the ready-to-reach effect of super reach may be set higher than when the development suggestive effect is not executed.

FIGS. 19-11 are explanatory diagrams of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table PB1-1. (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In this characteristic part 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same variation pattern determination table for big wins is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of the big win. However, a plurality of big hit variation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different big hit variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the type of big win. may be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that can be easily determined for each big win type, so that the player can be made to pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a big win. It can improve amusement interest.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern), PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern of loss), PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern of loss), PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach β) do.

Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic unit 006SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the rate of execution of variable display increases due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. For judgment of the general pattern display result. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 19-1 is provided with, for example, a production control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 19-15 (A) includes a effect control flag setting portion, a effect control timer setting portion, a effect control counter setting portion, and a effect control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 006SG, the data constituting the reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure that is being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and a pending memory number notification command ( The first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are associated with these starting opening winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

FIG. 19-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 006SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 006SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 006 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), it moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 006SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 006SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 006 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 006SGS148), it moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special symbol display result determination shown in FIG. Select and set a table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 006 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , in the processing of step 006 SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value) special figure display result is determined to be a ``big hit'', when the game state is a high-probability state, it is determined (determined) as a ``big hit'' with a higher probability than when it is a low-probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 006SGS150a (step 006SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit turns on the jackpot flag (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 006 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (Step 006 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006 SGS154, the game state after the jackpot game state is terminated is any one of the time-saving state and the probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006 SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" at step 006SGS150a (step 006SGS150a; N), whether to control to the jackpot game state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on) ), a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 006SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 006SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 006SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

19-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 14 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 19-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination at step 006SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the game state is changed by determining whether the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 006 SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit By reading, etc., specify the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure, and determine whether or not the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170).

If the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172 ).

When the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 006 SGS172; Y), as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected. (Step 006SGS173).

In addition, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 006 SGS172; N), the variation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as a table to be used for determining (step 006SGS174), and proceed to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processing of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation random number buffer Based on, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for big hits, variation pattern determination table for special hits, or variation pattern determination table for loss A to D, any of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step 006SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 006SGS175. That is, the process of step 006 SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 006SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start any one of the special symbols games using the second special symbols (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands that are used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the required time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006 SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

FIG. 19-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184). , a winning start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a winning start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a winning start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored in the performance control board 12, The setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the effect control board 12 to transmit a game state designation command indicating a normal state (step 006 SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (step 006 SGS187). In addition, the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006 SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), at step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 006 SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 006SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or the time saving flag After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006 SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIGS. 19-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 14 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not the non-probability variation jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving frequency counter is set to "0". is set (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. 19-16 are part of the flow chart of the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes background image change processing (step 006 SG 162 ) is executed, and one of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change process, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of the variable display (timing at which the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). A change in the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image in accordance with the determination. That is, in the present characteristic portion 006SG, in a state in which any one of a plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variably displayed and an effect corresponding to the variable display is executed. there is

In addition, in the background image change process, the effect control CPU 120 changes when the game state changes (for example, from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the probability change state or time saving state, from the probability change state or time saving state to the jackpot state or normal state), the background image corresponding to the game state after the change may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

FIGS. 19-17 are diagrams showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display start setting process. The values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are decremented by one (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). Also, based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.), the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed. (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance parts) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the next display screen of the left, middle and right decoration patterns (display switching of the previous decoration pattern). The image data of the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the point in time) is created (step 006SGS922). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y) Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a display image processing flag, which will be described later, is ON (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is ON (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is OFF (step 006SGS924; N), confirm the contents of the process data being executed. Etc., it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting the development of the super ready-to-win effect (step 006 SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting development to ready-to-win production of super reach (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927; move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes display image processing for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

At step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control section 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created at steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as the set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, the decorative design, etc. in the variation of the decorative design.

As shown in FIGS. 19-19, the image displayed within the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic portion 006SG includes a part of the background image and a background image previously positioned so as to be displayed within the display area. are the first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and the decorative design, which have been adjusted. In particular, the background image in the characteristic portion 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5. The central portion of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. In other words, in the characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are larger in vertical width and horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. This is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature part 006SG, the layer 3 image drawing area, the displaced image creating area, and the display image creating area are drawn and arranged so that the vertical width dimension and the horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An image having the same vertical width and horizontal width as the display area of the image display device 5 is used as an area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and horizontal width. may be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creating area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creating area. A background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5 .

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 006 SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 006 SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

FIG. 19-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 19-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is ON (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display according to the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the image data for displacement for successful development to the super reach effect (for notifying the execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then proceed to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

Note that the image data for displacement in this characteristic portion 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of this characteristic portion 006SG, an image in which an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed) This is data in which displacement images to be applied to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, when the variable display being executed is a variable display according to the normal reach effect variation pattern (step 006 SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop to the super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). It is determined at a predetermined ratio which of the displacement image data for super ready-to-win effect development failure A and the displacement image data for super ready-to-win effect development failure B to be selected as the image data for displacement (step 006 SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data for A for failure to develop the super ready-to-win effect may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data for B for failure to develop the super ready-to-win effect may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as displacement image data for failure to develop to the super ready-to-win effect, there are two displacement image data for failure to develop the super ready-to-win effect A and B for failure to develop the super ready-to-win effect. Although the form in which the displacement image data can be selected is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. There may be more than one.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A has been determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B is selected and step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS947).

At step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Further, when the display image processing flag is ON at step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006 SGS950).

At step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes displacement image drawing processing. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120, for example, draws an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. A displacement target image is created by synthesizing (superimposing), and a displacement image is created by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process If the displacement image created in step 1 is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing ends without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the ornamental pattern in the characteristic portion 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-20 to 19-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 19-20(A) and 19-20(B), in this characterizing portion 006SG, the display mode of the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is different depending on the game state. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-20 (A), when the game state is a normal state (low-probability-low base state), as a decoration pattern, a character image and a numerical image are combined for a normal state A decoration pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-20 (B), if the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), as a decoration pattern, decoration for time saving state only number image A pattern is displayed.

Then, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. After that, as the middle decorative pattern, the decorative pattern having a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggesting effect is executed. 19-21(C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I of the display area displayed on the image display device 5 is a left area 006SG005L containing the left decorative pattern. , middle region 006SG005C containing the middle decorative pattern, and right region 006SG005R containing the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (the decoration pattern and the background image included in the middle region 006SG005C) is gradually changed. A development notification pattern (shown in FIGS. 19-21 (C) to 19-21 (E) that notifies the development of the reach performance of super reach from above by sliding downward. ) is moved toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed.

It should be noted that the development notification pattern in this characterizing portion 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestive effect is executed, and is a pattern that is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 19-21(C) and the two steps shown in FIG. 3rd stage shown in FIGS. 19-21(E) and increasing as the stages go through.

When the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are completely slid in the third stage, the images are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C). When the movement of the development notification pattern is completed, the development of the super reach to the reach performance is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the variation pattern of normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. After that, as the middle decorative pattern, the decorative pattern having a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggesting effect is executed. 19-22(C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I of the display area displayed on the image display device 5 is a left area 006SG005L containing the left decorative pattern. , middle region 006SG005C containing the middle decorative pattern, and right region 006SG005R containing the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-22(C) to 19-22(E), the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (the decoration pattern and the background image included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually changed. As the player slides downward, a development notification pattern for notifying that a super reach performance will develop from above is moved toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed.

In addition, according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first stage shown in FIG. 19-22(C) and the two stages shown in FIG. 19-22(D) It increases as you go through the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or after the second stage slide movement is executed. After being executed, as shown in FIG. 19-22(E), the development suggestion effect is completed without executing the third slide movement, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to that shown in FIG. Return to the state shown in -22 (B), and stop at the combination of the decorative pattern and the small pattern indicating a failure.

As shown in FIGS. 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), in this characteristic portion 006SG, the amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R exemplifies a form that increases as it passes through stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R The amount of movement may decrease as the steps progress, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in one of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 006SG, as a development suggestive effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R has been exemplified as a mode in which each image can be moved and displayed up to three levels, but the present invention is this. However, the number of steps for sliding the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R as the development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), in this characteristic portion 006SG, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. Although a form in which the direction is opposite to that of the displayed image is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. may be in the same direction as the image displayed on the

In addition, in the present characterizing section 006SG, the form of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for the development suggestive effect when the game state is the normal state (low-probability-low base state) was exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the game state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) .

In addition, as a development suggestion production in this characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. A first interface image 006SG005I including 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the three-image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image creation area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed to display on the image display device 5. An image is being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-22, in both the case of the variable display of the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the case of the variable display of the super reach fluctuation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image to be drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the decoration pattern moves upward or downward in the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestive effect, thereby lowering the visibility of the player, while the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J is maintained in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 and the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is reduced. no.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-22, in the variable display with the variation pattern of Super Reach, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide up to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are displaced for sliding movement to the first stage and the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state than the variable display in the variation pattern of normal reach, so in this feature part 006SG, the development The ratio of control to the jackpot game state differs according to the image data for displacement used in the suggestive effect.

In addition, in the development suggestion production of this characteristic portion 006SG, the left area 006SG005L includes the left decoration pattern, the middle area 006SG005C includes the middle decoration pattern, and the right area 006SG005R includes the right decoration pattern, and these left, middle, and right Since the decorative patterns of , including characters and numbers, slide without being divided, it is possible to prevent the interest of the development suggestion production from decreasing due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 006SG, the image of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are respectively moved upward or downward, but the present invention is not limited to this. , only one or two of the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R may move upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 006SG, image data for displaying decorative patterns and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative patterns and background images are combined. Specific production that displaces the display position of these decorative patterns and background images only by using (development suggestion production in characteristic part 006SG, reach suggestion production in modification 006SG-1, revival production in modification 006SG-2, modification 006SG- 3, promotion effect in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in modification 006SG-6) can be executed, so these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where

In particular, in the present characteristic part 006SG, since a plurality of images can be displayed as background images in the image display device 5, a specific effect should be produced according to the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. Although the pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced by simply using the displacement image data in the characteristic portion 006SG. Data volume can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the number of first special figure reserved memories and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the number of second special figure reserved memories , and small patterns having a smaller display area than the decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game-related information includes a A fourth state or probability variable state that can identify the execution of the launch promotion display or variable display that urges the player to launch (fire) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 A pattern or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area with the highest image display priority. Since it is a non-target image for image displacement in the development suggestion production, the display position does not shift with the image of the left area 006SG005L, the image of the right area 006SG005R, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement. It is possible to prevent game-related information such as the number of each special figure reserved memory and the variable display of small symbols from becoming difficult for the player to see when the performance is executed.

Further, the second interface image 006SG005J of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestive effect. Since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself is not displaced, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion presentation. The first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R so that the number of the first special figure reserved storage can be specified. It is possible to recognize the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that displays the reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the number of second special figure reserved memories so that they can be specified.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. Visibility is lowered by moving upward or downward from the part, so that the production effect of the development suggestion production can be improved. Furthermore, the small pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative pattern, it does not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when executing the development suggestive effect, so the visibility does not decrease. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbols even during execution of the development suggesting performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in the development suggestive effect of this characterizing portion 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R increases step by step. , while improving the production effect of the development suggestion production, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be emphasized at each stage, so the production effect is further improved. can.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide up to the third stage. While the displacement image data is used, in the variable display with the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are displacement images for sliding movement to the first stage and the second stage. Since the data for use is used, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is different according to the image data for displacement used in the development suggestive effect, so the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestive effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving steps of the image, and to improve the performance interest of the development suggestive performance.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 19-21 and 19-22, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R use displacement image data in which the images slide up to the third stage. In the case of using the displaced image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R are slid to the first step, the portion in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R are slid to the first stage is common. In the case of using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid up to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are up to the second stage. Since the image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has a common portion where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the second stage, the left area 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. , middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of stages in which the images slide and move, so that the interest of the development suggestion performance can be further improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the characterizing portion 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggesting effect suggesting development of a super reach effect to a reach effect was exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 19-24 and 19-25 as modification 006SG-1, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, it is suggested that it becomes a reach during variable display. A reach suggestion effect may be made executable.

The rendering mode of the ready-to-win suggestive rendering will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24 and 19-25. First, in the variable display of normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, as shown in FIGS. An effect image such as a character acts on the pattern, and the left decorative pattern is stopped. At this time, a portion of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower portion of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-24(D) to 19-24(F), at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops, the effect image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is displayed. The decorative pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a portion of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower portion of the right decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. , the effect image such as a character acts on and the left decorative pattern is stopped. At this time, a portion of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower portion of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-25(D) to 19-25(F), at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops, an effect image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern. A number of symbols that are not a combination of reach are stopped as decorative symbols. At this time, the right decoration pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a portion of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower portion of the right decorative pattern is displayed without being distorted.

In addition, as a reach suggestion effect in this modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, an effect image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on the . Furthermore, in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-1, non-reach, normal reach, a form in which the reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, The reach suggesting effect may not be executed in part of the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-1, as the ready-to-reach suggestive production, the action image such as the character acts on the left and right decorative patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the ready-to-win suggestive effect in the variable display of the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern, a case may be provided in which the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (acts only on the left decorative symbol).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as the ready-to-win suggestive effect, the action image such as the character acts on the decorative pattern. effect images can be displayed, and the reach rate may be varied according to which effect image acts on the decoration pattern.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-1, in the case where the action image such as a character acts as a ready-to-win suggestive effect but does not become a ready-to-win, the decorative pattern that acted or the background image that overlaps the display area with the decorative pattern is displayed. Although a form in which a portion is not distorted has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A portion of the background image where the display area overlaps the decorative pattern affected by the above may be distorted.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an effect image such as a character acts as a ready-to-reach effect, a part of the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts and the decorative pattern is distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a ready-to-reach effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts, the decorative pattern, and the display area overlap. Only one of the background images may be distorted.

Further, in the characterizing portion 213SG, the development suggesting effect suggesting the development of the super reach effect to the reach effect was exemplified as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. 19-27 and 19-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a combination that is once lost It may be possible to execute a resurrection performance that changes to a combination of big hits.

The effect mode of the resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-27 and 19-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 19-27(A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a loss as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is a reach. A swinging display is displayed by a combination of deviations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in an overlapping manner in the middle decoration pattern, and a plurality of middle decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first-stage crack. is split into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 19-27 (B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. From the central part of the device 5, they move in different directions so as to diffuse.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. Move to diffuse.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image in which fragments of the inner decorative pattern scatter so as to be dispersed is finally displayed, and then a new decorative pattern indicating a big win is displayed as the inner decorative pattern, Variable display stops.

On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a loss, as shown in FIG. Reach is displayed as a swinging combination of misses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in an overlapping manner in the middle decoration pattern, and a plurality of middle decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first-stage crack. is split into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 19-28 (B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. From the central part of the device 5, they move in different directions so as to diffuse.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. Move to diffuse.

However, in a variable display in which the variable display result is a deviation, after the first stage of cracking is performed, after the second stage of cracking is performed, or after the third stage of cracking is performed, The resurrection effect is completed without executing the cracking in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. Stop at the indicated combination.

Incidentally, as the resurrection effect in this modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Furthermore, in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is used to create a displacement image, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement image (medium is divided into a plurality of pieces, and an image is created in which the pieces are displayed so as to spread.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in this modification 006SG-2, the middle decoration pattern is gradually expanded as the resurrection effect. increases step by step, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the resurrection performance more effectively by the stepwise enlargement of the decoration pattern therein.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapped with the decoration pattern inside as a resurrection effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is displayed. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit may be varied according to which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 19-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are displayed at a rate of 20% when the resurrection effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the resurrection effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the resurrection effect is executed, and the red crack effect image is displayed at a rate of 20% when the resurrection effect is executed. The image 006SG005H should be displayed.

In this modification 006SG-2, two colors of red and blue are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H are Three or more colors may be provided.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-2, the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state) exemplified the form of executing the resurrection effect, but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the resurrection effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low-probability-low base state).

In addition, in this modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 19-28, the decoration pattern in the resurrection effect is composed of a plurality of fragments, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , these fragments are moved step by step from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral portion, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plurality of pieces forming the scene may be increased step by step according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, the player can be strongly impressed with the resurrection effect by the visual effect that the number of pieces forming the decorative pattern inside increases according to the progress of the resurrection effect.

Further, in the characterizing section 006SG, the development suggesting effect suggesting the development of the super reach effect to the reach effect was exemplified as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 19-31 as modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the super reach variation pattern in the reserved memory. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling performance suggesting from the previous variable display a plurality of times that the variable display result will be a big hit.

An effect mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 19-31(A) and 19-31(B) in a state where there are a plurality of reserved memories, the variable display being executed stops at a combination of decorative symbols that are not displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-31(C) and 19-31(D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect that traverses the display area to the left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. The image 006SG005S is displayed overlapping the decoration pattern and the background image. Then, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I in the display area displayed on the image display device 5 is a lower lower area 006SG005B including part of the decorative design and the background image bordering on the cut effect image 006SG005S, and the remaining area 006SG005B. It is divided into an upper upper region 006SG005T containing decorative designs and background images. In other words, the boundary between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 19-31 (D) to 19-31 (E), the lower area 006SG005B is to the left along the cut effect image 006SG005S, and the upper area 006SG005T is to the right along the cut effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides leftward along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides rightward along the cutting effect image 006SG005S further slides upward. . At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

19-31(E) and 19-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward. starts to display a black image. The display area of the black image expands as the lower region 006SG005B slides downward and the upper region 006SG005T slides upward, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T extend outside the display region. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, resulting in a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decoration pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5 . It should be noted that this prefetching announcement effect is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the external prefetching target is started.

As the pre-reading announcement effect in this modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 19-32(A) to 19-32(F), the first reserved storage A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Furthermore, in the VRAM area of this modification 006SG-3, there are a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. are placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in this modification 006SG-3, in the pre-reading notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. While the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side. Since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B to the left and right sides as the pre-reading notice effect, and the game interest can be improved. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image. Since the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not change even if the display position of the region 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B can be changed by comparing the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the rendering effect of the look-ahead preview rendering can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-31(D) and 19-31(E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region By moving the boundary between 006SG005B and 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the performance effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further enhanced, and the performance interest can be improved. In particular, as a pre-reading preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 19-31 (D) and 19-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so that the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-reading notice effect. can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a vertical direction different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be different from either one of

In this modification 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview effect, and a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and the variable display of the pre-reading target is performed according to which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The ratio of the variable display result in .

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, three colors of blue, green, and red are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the prefetch target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. 10% of the time it is displayed in blue, 30% of the time it is displayed in green, and 60% of the time it is displayed in red. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the prefetch target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S displayed during the pre-reading notice effect, so that the effect of the pre-reading notice effect can be further enhanced.

In this modification 006SG-3, three colors of blue, green, and red are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display colors of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four colors or more. In addition, the ratio of the variable display result of the prefetch target to a big hit (big hit expectation) may be changed according to aspects other than the color such as the shape and size of the cut effect image 006SG005S and the number of displayed cut effect images 006SG005S. .

In addition, in the modification 006SG-3, as the preview effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as the preview effect. In this case, the rendering effect of the look-ahead advance notice rendering may be improved by making the directions in which the regions slide and move in different directions.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, as the pre-reading notice effect, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are respectively moved, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice effect Only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B may be moved as a region.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the left side It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to . Therefore, even if the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different, so that the pre-reading notice effect is performed. The game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable, and the game can be prevented from losing interest in the game.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side is different from the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after movement to the right and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after movement to the left. At least a part with the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the look-ahead foretelling effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 19-31(C) and 19-31(D), at the timing before execution of the pre-reading preview effect, the upper region in the display region of the image display device 5 The image displayed over 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as the preview effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, in the display area of the image display device 5, it is displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. A part of the image that is displayed may not be displayed as an image that is displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-reading preview effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the attraction of the look-ahead preview effect.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview effect (in FIG. When the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as the pre-reading preview effect ) can be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B that move in opposite directions as the pre-reading notice effect, the effect of the pre-reading notice effect can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-33, in the present modification 006SG-3, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display result of the prefetch target to be a big hit is changed according to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S. is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 19-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may differ according to the display color of the final cut effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the characterizing section 006SG, the development suggesting effect suggesting the development of the super reach effect to the reach effect was exemplified as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 19-35 as a modification 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, once during the variable display, a non-probable variable big hit or a two-round probability variable with a small number of rounds After the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination showing the type of the big win such as the big win, the left, middle and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in a state in which they are arranged in the combination showing the big win, and finally the combination of the decorative patterns is stopped. A promotion effect (also referred to as a re-lottery effect) for notifying the jackpot type may be executed.

The effect mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. A combination indicating a jackpot type with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 19-35(A), a combination of even numbers "2" indicating a non-variable jackpot) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed as a promotion effect, such as a 2 round high probability big hit, a 5 round high probability big hit, a 10 round high probability big hit, and so on. The combination of decorative patterns of the other jackpot types is included in the variable display at a constant speed.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (C) and 19-35 (D), the vertical central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 is directed leftward over two stages. and distorted.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 19-35 (A)). In some cases, after the distortion of the first stage or the second stage of promotion production, the decoration pattern stops at the combination of the jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 19-35 (E), the combination of probability variable jackpots). On the other hand, when the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative patterns displayed first, the decorative pattern is applied after the first-stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at a combination of jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 19-35 (F), a non-probability variable jackpot combination).

In addition, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types in this modification 006SG-5 is whether or not it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game is finished, or whether it is controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot game is finished. It refers to those with different variable display counts and those with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot game.

In addition, as a promotion effect in this modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 (A) to 19-36 (E), the first reserved storage display A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn. background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and By applying the image for displacement to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted leftward.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image creation area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is to be created.

Note that the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction, as in the characteristic portion 006SG. (see FIGS. 19-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. It may be the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the display device 5 .

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. When the central portion is distorted leftward, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 19-37, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, the display area shown in FIG. -39 (A) ~ Figure 19-39 (D), as shown in Figure 19-39 (D), when executing the promotion effect, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the layer 3 image drawing area drawn and By enlarging the arranged background image or by enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decoration pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, part of the background image is moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. In this way, by applying the image for displacement to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as promotion effects, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, it is inappropriate for the image display device 5 that the image non-display portion described above is formed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed.

In FIGS. 19-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area is shown. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of the image non-display portion, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the modification 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, a displacement image is placed on the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the lateral width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5 .

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5, promotion effects are executed. When doing so, by enlarging the decorative pattern drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, an image non-display part is formed during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn and arranged. Enlargement of the displayed background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to an increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by abruptly enlarged display of the decoration pattern and the background image on the image display device 5. It is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as display of an image non-display portion on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 006SG, a mode was exemplified in which the development suggesting effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of super reach during variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during variable display , it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous performance including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols, and the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) may be varied according to the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed. .

In particular, in the variable display that executes such a pseudo continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbols, and a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. A temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative symbols may be made executable.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-5, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 when executing the promotion effect, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. By arranging a part, an example has been exemplified in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed while the promotion effect is being executed. An image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 is stored as an image for presentation (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, at least the horizontal width dimension is longer than the horizontal width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5). By drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, the image non-display portion may be prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modification 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. By arranging a part, the formation of the image non-display part is prevented during execution of the promotion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. At this time, in the display image creation area, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, outside the display area of the image display device 5 on the right side). An image (non-display image) different from the displayed image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5. Then, a part of the non-display image is displayed.

In the characterizing section 006SG, the development suggesting effect suggesting the development of the super reach effect to the reach effect is exemplified as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. 19-40 to 19-42 as a modified example 006SG-6, the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is the temporary stop suggesting effect or the temporary stop notification effect. may be executed.

The rendering mode of the temporary stop suggesting rendering will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-40. First, as shown in FIG. 19-40(A), after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right ornamental patterns stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win. After that, as a temporary stop suggesting effect, a pseudo-continuous symbol (symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the ornamental symbol, moves downward from above. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the periphery of the display area toward the center of the display area, and an image ( Left and right decorative patterns and background images) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped), the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 19-40(B). , the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and pseudo continuous symbol. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped), the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as they are, as shown in FIG. It moves downwards in the display area of the image display device 5 and is not displayed, and a pattern indicating that the result of variable display is a failure is displayed as a decoration pattern inside.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-40, in this modification 006SG-6, by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) is suggested to be temporarily stopped. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and it is determined in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is to be displayed as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the decorative symbols (pseudo continuous symbols) temporarily stop may be varied.

For example, in FIG. 19-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double displayed) as the pseudo-continuation suggestive effect, but as shown in FIG. may be displayed, and the rate at which the decoration pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped may be changed according to the number of the ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed as part of the decorative symbols, that is, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern different from the ornamental pattern, and may be a special symbol that is displayed only during the pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-42(A) and 19-42(B), the temporary stop notification effect is executed after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and then the ripple effect image 006SG005P The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to be diffused from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, and the images around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decoration patterns and the background image) are distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in this modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 19-43 (A) to 19-43 (F), , a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns are drawn, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A decorative pattern including a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the VRAM area of this modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created from the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (ripples) is applied to the displacement target image by applying the displacement image. A distorted decoration pattern and background image) are created by the effect image 006SG005P.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the characterizing section 006GS, the mode of displaying the effect image using the image display device 5 capable of displaying only the planar view image was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG- 7, as shown in FIGS. 19-44 and 19-45, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. In the characteristic portion 006SG and the modified example described above, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a planar view image (2D image) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) device is used as the image display device 5. However, in this modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 19-44, a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 that allows a player to visually recognize a stereoscopic image with the naked eye by a parallax barrier method ' can be used to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 19-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of the modification 006SG-7 has a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image). image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, a backlight 006SG901 for emitting planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front side, and the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 006SG900 and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 allows the left eye of the player to visually recognize the image for the right eye (R image) displayed in the form of a vertically long strip on the liquid crystal panel for image 006SG900, and the image for the left eye (L image) to the right eye of the player. a vertically striped black portion that serves as a shutter that prevents the player from viewing the image for the right eye, and a transparent portion that allows the image for the right eye to be viewed by the right eye of the player and the image for the left eye to be viewed by the left eye of the player. A liquid crystal with relatively high optical transparency that is capable of a parallax barrier image display state that displays a parallax barrier image, and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent and have no vertical striped black portions. It is considered a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, the right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the parallax barrier image ( A planar view image (2D image) can also be displayed by using a fully transparent display.

In other words, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′, which is the display means of the modification 006SG-7, is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image. It is possible to display an autostereoscopic image that is displayed.

Note that the stereoscopic image composed of the image for the right eye and the image for the left eye displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is drawn in each layer described above, similarly to the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel The parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When a performance image is displayed using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', during the variable display, another performance is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific performance (for example, development suggestive performance) in the present invention. It may be executable by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 19-45(A) to 19-45(D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5′ displays the displacement specific image, as described above. A development suggestive effect, which is a specific effect in which images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R that have moved downward and an image of the middle region 006SG005C that has moved downward, can be executed. As a non-overlapping advance notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

In other words, the development suggesting effect is executed as a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed. In this case, only the monoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

In this way, when the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By using a two-dimensional image (2D image) as an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest in the performance is reduced. can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R, which are the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R, which are the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image) and the displacement specific image, and the middle region 006SG005C, which is the middle region 006SG005C, are moved downward. Since the execution period differs from the development suggestive effect, which is a specific effect in which the image is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the displacement specific image and the stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same presentation, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed. Data such as a display flag that can identify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored so that the image) is not displayed, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) is generated based on the data. may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent the stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement identification image is completed, a predetermined time before and after the period in which the displacement identification image is displayed Also during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the modification 006SG-7 described above, the parallax barrier stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device of a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in the modification 006SG0-7, a mode in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also displayed in the development suggestion effect. A case of displaying an image (3D image) may be provided. In addition, when displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion production, draw and The image may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the monoscopic image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-7, as the effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), the notice effect during variable display, which suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit, is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although a form that can be executed in a period has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a period before the development suggestive production (specific production), the introduction production of the development suggestive production (specific production) A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as . In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed so that the player can recognize in advance that the development suggestive effect (specific effect) will be executed. can further improve the performance effect of Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction production and the development suggestion production (specific production) are provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion production (specific production) is provided according to which production mode the introduction production is executed. It can be different.

In addition, in the introductory effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the motion of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introductory effect and the development suggestive effect (specific effect). may be improved.

Further, in the characterizing section 006SG, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to slot machines.

Incidentally, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. (corresponding to image 006SG005J), display of medal payout, display of the number of remaining AT (assist time) games, display of medals stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information are displayed. A non-objective image of displacement may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, as the specific effect of the present invention, a mode of executing the effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the specific effect, the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed or distorted repeatedly.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, as the specific effects in the present invention, the development suggesting effect, the reach suggesting effect, the resurrection effect, the pre-reading notice effect, the promotion effect, the temporary stop suggesting effect, and the temporary stop notification effect are exemplified. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executable. In addition, in the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute in the normal state an effect in which decorative patterns (characters and numbers) are not separated, such as a development suggestive effect. On the other hand, an effect in which the decoration pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas may be executed, such as a resurrection effect or a pre-reading forewarning effect. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific performance from decreasing due to the fact that the decorative patterns including characters and numbers are not separated, and in the time saving state, conversely, the decorative patterns with only numbers are displayed. By dividing, the production effect of the specific production can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 006SG, in the normal state, the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers, and in the time-saving state, the decorative pattern is composed only of numbers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, You may change the display mode of a decoration design from the middle of the variable display by a specific variation pattern, such as the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach. For example, in the variable display of super reach, during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, the variable display of the decoration pattern composed of characters and numbers is executed, and in the period after the reach, the decoration pattern composed only of numbers is executed. variable display. Furthermore, in the period after the ready-to-win, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect such as the resurrection effect in which the decoration pattern is divided.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 006SG and each modified example, an image obtained by displacing at least a part of the specific image in the present invention in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction is displayed on the image display device 5 as the displacement specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 may display an image obtained by enlarging or reducing at least a part of the specific image as the displacement specific image. That is, the image displacement direction in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and the vertical direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-3 and 19-4, in the displacement target image, from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image, according to the R value and the G value of the pixel A Although the form of generating the displaced image in the replacement method of specifying the pixel X and displacing (replacement) the pixel X to the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, in the image to be displaced, the displaced image is displaced by a method (moving method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. may be generated. In addition, in the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into the displacement image considering the width of the boundary between the areas moving in different directions, as in the modification 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, there is no need to edit these items, so it is possible to reduce the load of creating the video, and when placing effect images etc. on the borders, setting the borders where the effect images are placed Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of suggesting control to the advantageous state and executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image;
By using the displayed special image, a special effect capable of executing a special effect of changing the suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a performance execution means;
display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, and capable of displaying a display image of game-related information relating to progress of a game in the display area;
storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area;
with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing a display position of at least part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The image processing means is capable of generating a displacement specific image by displacing the specific image arranged in a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image when the suggestive effect is being executed, and executes the special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. game machine.

Images